Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

Introduction In this tutorial. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. Finally. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. 1 . you learn how to create and set up an MEP project.

2 .

Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. and piping. Add more detailed modelling elements. and plumbing fixtures. such as mechanical equipment. electrical. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. fixtures. Germany. such as duct. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. electrical panels. and plumbing engineering workflows. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. 3 . You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. Add basic MEP elements. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP.

they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. However. you learn where the training files are located. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. to provide a richer and more finished design. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. and sheets to document the project. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. When you open a training file. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. templates. however. Metric file names have an _m suffix. In this exercise. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. For example. You do not design entire systems. Metric: files for users working with metric units. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. Contact your CAD manager for more information. Create detail views. views. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. After completing each exercise. is located and accessed in the training files location. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. On the Contents tab. your Training folder may be in a different location. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. Create schedules. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. When you install the training files as instructed. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. So. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. NOTE Depending on your installation. For example. as well as how to open and save them. such as templates and families. and tags. when you add ductwork. you can choose to save your work. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . annotations.

For Files of type. For example. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. enter the new file name. 3 In the right pane. and you can open any supported file type. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Accessing Training Files | 5 . and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name.rvt and make changes. You may close the file with or without saving changes. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. For File name.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. if you open settings. scroll down. a list of file types displays. the Open dialog displays. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. click ➤ Save As. and click the Training Files icon. and click Save. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. double-click Imperial or Metric. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. select the folder in which to save the new file.rvt) is selected. 4 Click the training file name. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. 8 If you have made changes. verify that Project Files (*. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. you are prompted to save the changes.

6 .

Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. drawing sheets. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. If the length of the elevation is changed. schedules. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. every drawing sheet. drawings. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. scope. and plans. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. ■ ■ 7 . sections. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. and schedules required for a building project. In this case. the operation of the software is parametric. the parameter is one of association or connection. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. In this case. the floor or roof remains connected. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. As you work in drawing and schedule views. and phases when you need it. hence. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. the door retains this relationship to the partition. the hierarchy of elements.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. 2D and 3D view. quantities. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. You learn the terminology. If you move the partition. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. In the Revit MEP model.

For example.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. sinks. They display in relevant views of the design. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. dimensions. dimensions. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. For example. and reference planes are datum elements. grids. For example. and 2D detail components. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. ducts. When you change something. sinks. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. and keynotes are annotation elements. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. and electrical panels. tags. sprinklers. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. ducts. and electrical panels. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. filled regions. walls and ceilings are hosts. For example. Examples include detail lines. boilers. tags. sprinklers. For example. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. levels. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. They help to describe or document the design. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. For example. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. boilers. Datum elements help to define project context. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building.

the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. In other cases. programming is not required. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . By using a single project file. and types. from geometry to construction data. such as roofs. Most often. you must be in a section or elevation view. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. North . To place levels.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. elevation views. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. and so forth). and ceilings. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. or bottom of foundation. first floor. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. If you can draw. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. The project file contains all information for the building design. top of wall. families. For example. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. This information includes components used to design the model. However. section views. and drawings of the design. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. floors. schedules. Often. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. you can explicitly control them. for example. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Project: In Revit MEP. they are implied by what you do and how you draw.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. In Revit MEP. you do nothing to establish these relationships. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. views of the project.

■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. System families include ducts. or layer the views to see only the one on top. Then experiment with them. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. and wires. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. identical use. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. For example. Type: Each family can have several types. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. A type can be a specific size of a family. Unlike system and standard component families. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. and similar graphical representation. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. such as a 30” X 42” title block. hiding. However. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. showing. For example. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. You can also display several project views at one time. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. A type can also be a style. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. System families can be transferred between projects. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . pipes. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. With a few clicks. For example. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. each in-place family contains only a single type.

The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. To return the panel to the ribbon. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels.

tools used for managing and modifying the current view. architect-specific tools.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. select the tool first. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. project and system parameters. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . tools used for editing existing elements. then select what you want to modify. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. tools used for running analysis on the current design. and for switching views. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. data and systems.. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. and CAD files. and settings. When working on the Modify tab. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed.. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.

By default. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. when adding duct. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . closes the application menu (double-click). Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. provides access to common tools. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. displays frequently used tools. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. To keep a panel expanded. For example. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. provides requested information.

(New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu.. such as Export and Publish. (Open) save the current drawing... (Save As) export the current drawing. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. (Export) On the application menu. select a template and create a new drawing.. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. click. select a file to open. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to.

. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. but is not enabled by default..On the application menu. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . publish the current project. (Print) access product and license information. family. or template file. or template file. (Licensing) close the file. family. annotation. to. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. provides views including Default 3D. Camera. (Publish) print the current drawing. annotation. click. and Walkthrough. saves a current project.. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session.. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. To enable or disable a tool item.

when you switch to another editing mode. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. Clear the Status Bar check mark. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. To show the Status Bar again. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. In addition. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). To hide the Status Bar. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. displaying the same information. workshared components. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. This displays the command history in a list. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. When you are highlighting an element or component. check the Status Bar.To undo or redo a series of operations. Starting with the most recent command. repeat the command. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. However. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. When you are using a command. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. Clipboard. or the Family Editor. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. Group. Modify. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable.

View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . for example. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. On the Quick Access toolbar. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. click (Modify). Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. Place a Wall. To change existing elements to a different type. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. When you place an element in a drawing. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type.To cancel or exit the current command. select one or more elements of the same category. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool.

The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. 1 Click ➤ Open. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. After you are familiar with these tasks. click Training Files. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. There are several ways to access zoom options. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view.rvt.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. For example. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. Zoom the view In the tutorials. In the following steps. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise.

click . NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. on the Navigation bar. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. NOTE As you zoom in and out. Modifying the View | 19 . 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). If you do not have a wheel mouse. When you release the mouse button. 9 To display SteeringWheels. To modify or add snap increments. 6 Click in the drawing area. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. the view zooms in on the selected area. In the drawing area. this is referred to as a crossing selection. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button.

Click and drag to orbit the design. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. moving the wheel to the desired location. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. As you move the mouse. ➤ Options. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. and click tin the Options dialog.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. To define settings for SteeringWheels. For more information about SteeringWheels. click the SteeringWheels tab. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. and then using the Zoom tool again. press ESC. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. 14 To exit the wheel. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .

Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. Similar controls. as shown. After you are familiar with these tasks. called drag controls. and select the duct. 2 Enter ZR. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. Small blue dots. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. bottoms. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials.Design. and open Level 2 . and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . display along the ends. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . These are the drag controls.Design ➤ Floor Plans.HVAC Plan . zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. referred to as shape handles.

click the Undo command. select the first item in the list.3 Click and drag the bottom control. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . or press CTRL+Z. on the Standard toolbar. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). 6 On the Undo menu. Move. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. All changes you make to a project are tracked. 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. In this example. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions.

click to specify the starting position. and drag it to the left as shown. for example. The duct is moved to the new position. 11 With the duct already selected. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. such as Move and Copy. require 2 clicks to complete the command. In this case. After selecting the element to move. Some commands. as shown. 10 Move the cursor to the right.8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. you want to move the duct. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . and click again to specify the ending position.

you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical .End a command Some commands. Select Mechanical . Click OK. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. such as the Modify Ducts command. Press ESC twice. 13 To end a command.Return. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. For example. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar.Supply. 14 Enter VG. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .

Performing Common Tasks | 25 .17 Close the file without saving your changes.

26 .

select Project. and loadable families. under Create new. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. create and manage views. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it.rte template. click Training files.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. You can either select a template from the template library. settings. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. link files. In that case. 6 Click OK. 27 . The template selection may vary depending on your installation. and geometry from the starting template. use copy/monitor. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. New projects inherit all the families. under Template file. and modify system settings. you learn how to start a project from a template. such as the default project units and settings. such as ducts and pipes. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. click Browse. the default building levels and standard views. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. 5 In the New Project dialog. system families. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. Finally. You can choose from several templates. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. and click Open. such as coordination review and interference checking. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default. 2 In the New Project dialog.

17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. click Edit. select Manchester. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. you can select it now. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. 10 Using the same method. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. select School or University. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . When you select the material. select Project template. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. select Level 1. If you want to use a template other than the default. for City. ■ For Building Construction. Click OK twice. click (Browse). (Browse). In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. review the construction materials listed. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. For example. 8 In the drawing area. navigate to Imperial Templates. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. NH. Click OK. under Energy Analysis. For Location. ■ ■ Under Create new. Click Cancel. In the Choose Template dialog. and open North. for Energy Data. create another new project using the Construction template. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. click Browse. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file.rte template and click Open. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads.7 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information.

5 1/2". plumbing. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. and demand factors for electrical systems. Click OK twice. 25 In the left pane. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. for 3 1/2". 4 1/2". clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 4 1/2". 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. click Rectangular. 24 In the right pane. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. 22 In the right pane. and 12 1/2". ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. power distribution systems. 23 In the left pane. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. and fire protection systems.rfa and click Open. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. wiring. 10 1/2". clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. select Views. 11 1/2". click Round. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. and 5 1/2". For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 33 Click OK. click Wiring. click Sizes. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . Holding CTRL.rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. for 3 1/2". they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. piping. 26 In the right pane. for 3/4". under Pipe Settings. After standard settings have been established for an organization. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. 27 Click OK. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. under Duct Settings. For Categories. select Identity Data. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. under Duct Settings. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines.

An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. under Create new. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. sheets. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. select Associated Level. 4 In the New Project dialog.rvt.Origin to Origin. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. 5 Click OK.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. From the Positioning list. click Browse. select View Name. click Training. Linking Projects In this exercise. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. families. For Then by. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. and groups that are contained in a project. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. Select Ascending Click OK twice. For Sort by. You need to create the MEP model for the project. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. select Auto . In addition. Click Open. select Project. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. 2 In the New Project dialog. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. To enable this coordination. under Template file. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. 38 Close the file. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. Notice that the file is saved as a template. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. select Sub-Discipline. select Family and Type. For Then by.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

or families. 15 Under Library Name. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. ➤ Open. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. and change the name to My Library. and click OK twice. templates. and click (Browse). Load. click the My Library icon. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. click (Add Value).11 In the Places dialog. and select it as the library path. Save. and click Open. and Import dialogs. click My Library. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list.

11 In the Options dialog. click Edit. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 3 Under Settings. click the Spelling tab. 12 Create a new project using the default template. such as bump maps. 21 On the File Locations tab. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. This path is determined during installation. 22 Select My Library. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. specify the new location here. select Ignore words in uppercase. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. If you work in a large office. click Edit. 23 Click 24 Click OK. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. click Places. 5 In the text editor. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 9 In the text editor. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. (Remove Value) to delete the library. enter sheetmtl-Cu. custom color files. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. If you want to relocate this path. click OK. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 19 Click Cancel. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 20 Click ➤ Options. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 2 In the Options dialog. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 14 Click in the drawing area. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. 27 Click OK. view the current path. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. and decal image files.

17 In the Spelling dialog. 6 In the Snaps dialog. In this exercise. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. click Edit. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file.. click the Spelling tab. 22 In the text editor.rte. click Training Files. You can turn snap settings on and off. 18 Click ➤ Options. 19 In the Options dialog. 23 In the text editor. you modify snap settings. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. click Close. 20 Under Settings. click OK. you modify snap increments. 24 In the Options dialog. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. click File menu ➤ Save. delete sheetmtl-CU. 21 Under Personal dictionary. and enter 1 . 2 In the New Project dialog. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. click Restore Defaults. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. As you zoom in and out within a view. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . click OK. work with snapping turned off. 25 Close the file without saving it. under Template file. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. 4 In the New Project dialog. click Browse. under Dimension Snaps. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. and then click File menu ➤ Exit.

This is the increment that you added previously. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. For example. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. zoom out until it does so. While sketching. such as ZO to zoom out. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. snapping reverts to the system default settings. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. If you do not have a wheel button. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area.7 Under Object Snaps. TIP To zoom while sketching. click OK. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. deselect Chain. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. use the wheel button on your mouse. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. enter SM. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. 8 In the Snaps dialog. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. 10 On the Options Bar. and move the cursor to the right. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. If it does not.

22 Move the cursor downward. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. the midpoint. and the wall edges..14 Click to set the wall endpoint. and move the cursor to the right. Notice that snapping is once again active. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. If you move the cursor along the wall. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. and specify the wall endpoint. 25 Click OK. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. Do not set the wall end point. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. with or without saving it. 26 Close the file. it will snap to the endpoints. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 19 Enter SM. and delete the value 1’ .

43 .Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems. You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system.

44 .

Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. go to http://www. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. By following the recommended workflow. duct system and a hydronic piping system. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. This system consists of a cooling tower. In this lesson. 45 . This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. water source heat pump (WSHP). you can choose to save your work. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. However. As you create the mechanical system. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. you first plan the system. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. and then you create a plenum level.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you will understand the process. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. you first configure the linked architectural model. If the tutorial training files are not present. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. you design a mechanical system for an office building.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. After applying a color scheme to the zones.autodesk. In this exercise. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. At the end of the tutorial. methodology. After finishing each exercise. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and after the linked model highlights. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. roof. click to select it. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. you add a level for plenums. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. These components are defined in the architectural training file. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. under Constraints. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume.Space Plan is highlighted. select Room Bounding. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. and click OK. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. not in the MEP training file. In this section. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces.rvt. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. ceilings. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. indicating that it’s the active view. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. NOTE When working with a linked file. Next.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files.

and click OK.MEP. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. 9 On the Draw panel. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. and enter Level 2 Plenum. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . For Offset. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. enter 8'. those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). 16 Press Esc. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. The new level is placed. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created.6 In the Project Browser. Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. Preparing Spaces | 47 . click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). and double-click West . and in the Plan View Types dialog. Click Plan View Types. verify that only Floor Plan is selected.

For View Classification. For Cut plane. and for Offset. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. Under View Depth. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In this exercise. In this exercise. right-click Level 2 Plenum. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. select Level Above (Level 3). 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. select Design. for Default View Template. you place spaces in areas of the building model. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. However. and then place spaces in various types of areas. select Plenum Plan. click Edit. NOTE After finishing each exercise. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Properties. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. Under Identity Data. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. enter 0. and click Apply Default View Template.Plenum. for View Range. right-click Level 2 Plenum. 20 In the Project Browser. enter an Offset of 1' 0".Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. ■ Click OK twice. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. you can choose to save your work. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. In the next exercise. for View Scale. For Sub-Discipline. for Level. select MEP . for Top.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. Under Extents.

Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. select Horizontal. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .rvt. enter 0. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. This specifies the vertical extent of the space.Space Plan is highlighted. select New. For Offset. For (Tag Location). 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. indicating that it’s the active view. For Upper Limit. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i. and ceilings). 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. Placing Spaces | 49 . For Space. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. walls. select Level 2 Plenum.

8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. enter 219. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 9 Select the space. ensuring coordination between the files. 14 In the drawing area. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. enter Library. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. for Number. For Name. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection.7 Click to place the space. Click OK.

For Upper Limit. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. For Offset. select Level 3.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Placing Spaces | 51 . 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. and then click Modify. enter 0. 21 Using the method learned previously. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.

52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. 23 Click OK. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. under Energy Analysis. you place a space in a large corridor area. and then split the space using a space separation line.22 In the Instance Properties dialog.

Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 5 On the Options Bar. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files.Space Plan is highlighted. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . for Upper Limit. select Level 3. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 0. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. and then press Esc. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. and for Offset. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel.

9 In the floor plan. as shown. change the space number to 216A. 10 Using the same method. In the schedule. 11 Close the schedule view. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. which was numbered 219Q. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. and press Enter. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. enter Corridor. double-click the space name.7 In the Project Browser. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. and scroll to the newly placed space. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. the plan view would have updated with the changes.

18 Close the file with or without saving it. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor.15 Press Esc twice. 16 Using the method learned previously. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. place a space in the lower area of the split space.

2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing.Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. If necessary. you place a space in a chase. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Space Plan is highlighted. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. indicating that it’s the active view. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. For Number. select Roof Level. 12 Click in the section view. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. but that the space does not fill the entire chase.4 Press Esc. For Limit Offset. enter Chase. for Upper Limit. for Name. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. On the Options Bar. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. click in the chase area to place the space. For Offset. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. select Level 3. right-click. In the plan view. enter 225PC. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. enter 4'. 6 Enter VG. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. and click Element Properties. select Interior and Reference. 10 In the plan view. enter 0. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. and then click OK. expand Spaces. select the space. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. Under Identity Data. for Upper Limit.

You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. 17 Type ZF. ceilings. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 20 Close the file with or without saving it. select Space Tag With Volume. under Loaded Tags.Bounding elements (such as walls. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and you placed spaces for various types of areas. floors.Space Plan. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. All spaces in the view are tagged. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. 15 Press Esc. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. In the next exercises. and maximize the view. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. and click OK.

After a space is placed in an area. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone.rvt. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. it is automatically added to the Default zone. under Spaces. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click View ➤ Zones. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. click Reference. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. In this exercise. click Training Files. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . 1 In the Project Browser. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). and verify that All Disciplines is selected. which removes the space from the Default zone.Zoning is highlighted. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. To display space reference lines. you view and verify zones in the System Browser.

indicating that the space is occupiable. In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i.5 In the System Browser. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. under Energy Analysis. Using the Edit Zone tab. select Occupiable. and click Finish Editing Zone. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. Next. and verify the zones in the System Browser. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 4 In the drawing area. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. and Electrical 220 spaces. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. The graphic in the System Browser updates. indicating that it’s the active view. As you do this. select Computer Lab 222. you assign spaces to zones in the building. To display space reference lines. click Reference. double-click 121 Cafeteria. you assign spaces to a zone. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . click Training Files. you can add or remove a space from the zone. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. Instruction 221. The Zone tool is active. under Spaces. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. You work with a single zone until you click Finish.Zoning is highlighted. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and modify the zone properties. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. and click OK. and a new zone is created. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone.rvt. the Edit Zone tab displays.

Click OK. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). type VG. Instruction. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone.In the System Browser. select HVAC Zones. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. 5 With the drawing area active. To view the zone in the drawing area. Expand HVAC Zones. you need to activate the zone visibility.

Area B. 9 In the System Browser. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. In this exercise. and click OK. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser.West . 11 Close the System Browser. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Reference. enter 2 . The new zone name displays in the System Browser. under Spaces. click Finish Editing Zone.West .Zoning is highlighted. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. 10 On the Edit Zone tab.TIP After you finish editing the zone. under Identity Data. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.Zoning. To display space reference lines. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and verify the zone in the System Browser. for Name. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. expand 2 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building.rvt. You activated zone visibility in the views. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. indicating that it’s the active view.

14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 15 Press Esc.Zoning view to activate it. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. 8 In the Level 1 . 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. 9 With the Add Space tool active. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone.5 Click in the Level 1 . zoom out. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 .Zoning floor plan. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space.Zoning view. click in the Level 2 . Verify that the distance is 1/2". Select Attached End.Zoning view.

17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog.Zoning to make it the active view. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. click Training Files. space.Zoning view. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. The new zone name displays in the System Browser.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed.East. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Front. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. for Name Value. and zone information. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i. double-click the zone tag. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. on the ViewCube. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. double-click Level 1 . and click OK. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser.rvt. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. click the corner where the Top. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. you verify the building. enter Lounge .

The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. you isolate the space. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. click (Isolate). Next. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. verify that Wireframe is selected. With 109 Lounge selected. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. and select 109 Lounge. Click (Highlight). The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view.4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). Using the Highlight tool.

scroll down in the left pane. click . click . select Lounge/Recreation. 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. and in the People dialog. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. verify that <Building> is selected. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab.■ On the Details tab. select 109 Lounge. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and then click OK. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. For Construction Type. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. and then click OK. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. the space information displays for the selected space. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. select 1_South_Lounge. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. Next. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. For Electrical Loads. ■ ■ ■ Next. Below the list of spaces and zones. click . For People. and click OK.

verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . For Heating Information. Below the list of spaces and zones. and dehumidification set point. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. This indicates the outdoor air per person. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool.00 °F : 54. roofs. For Cooling Information.00 °F : 90. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. outdoor air per area. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type.Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge.00 °F : N/A is specified. verify that <Building> is selected. This indicates the cooling set point. the zone information displays for the selected zone. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. This indicates the heating set point. floors.00 °F : N/A is specified. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. heating air temperature. click (Shading). you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. cooling air temperature. verify that 70. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. Next. verify that 74. and humidification set point. and air changes per hour. 12 Using the methods learned previously. and other room-bounding components.

enter 212P. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. 15 In the Project Browser. Under Energy Analysis. open MEP . enter 0.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. select Level 3. For Offset. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. click Cancel. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Under Energy Analysis. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Because this is an unoccupied space. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. Modify space properties 19 Select the space. For Name. for Number. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Click OK. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. select Plenum. select Plenum.Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select space Plenum 212P. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone.rvt. For Location. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. On the Place tab. click Edit. and zone information. click in the Value field. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . double-click Level 2 . verify that Manchester. select School or University. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. enter 03101. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. for Energy Data. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i. In this exercise. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. For Postal Code. click Training Files. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. you verified building. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. and verify that the space has replaced the void. NH. under Energy Analysis. space. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. for City. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 .Space Plan. is selected. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building.

■ In the Type Properties dialog. select Library . you need to select this option. right-click. For Export Complexity. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. click in the Value column. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. For Sliver Space Tolerance. verify that <Building> is specified. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. For Latent. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. verify that 1' 0" is specified. this option adjusts the times automatically. and click OK. For Sensible. and enter 50 sq. select space Library 219.When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. select Heated and cooled. For Space Type. Click OK twice. For Condition Type. verify that Level 1 is selected. and click Element Properties. enter 150 Btu/h. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. verify that Occupiable is selected. or neither. For Ground Plane. a cooling load. In order to select a space. for Values. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. for Values. enter 200 Btu/h. 8 In the drawing area.Audio Visual. Under Heat Gain (per Person). verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. and then click . after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. click Edit. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. for Building Service. and click OK. Select Area per person. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. ■ On the Weather tab. both. select Specified. For Building Construction. ft. For People. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. If. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. select Specified. For Project Phase. and click OK. under Volume Computations. verify that New Construction is selected.

You should correct the space error in the building model. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). click Edit. NH. click Calculate. 12 Click the Details tab. and click to learn the cause for the warning. and click OK. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. Next. select Actual. For Building Construction. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model.■ ■ ■ Click OK. You have verified the building information. Select the space associated with the warning. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. verify that School or University is selected. For Electrical Loads. Under Power. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. For Building Service. click Information). verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. For Location. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. select Actual. select 219 Library. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. for Values. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . Click OK twice. There should be no warnings displayed. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. is specified. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. and can be modified here. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. for Values. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. verify that <Building> is specified. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. verify that Manchester. and under Heating Information.

or zone information. space. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . click to the right of the building to place the legend. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . Click OK. 17 In the loads report. In this exercise. or make any changes to the model. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type.rvt. 16 After you review the loads report. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. space. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. 21 Click OK. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. click Training Files. 15 Review the loads report for project. 3 In the drawing area. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. select HVAC Zones. under Energy Analysis. and zone information for the building model. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. and a loads report displays. 19 In the drawing area. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . weather. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select 219 Library. indicating that it’s the active view. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building.Space Plan. For Color Scheme. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected.

Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. select Tonnage Range. You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. select the color scheme legend. in 1-ton increments. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. under Schemes. and click OK.5 Zoom in to the legend. The new scheme displays in the view.

9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 11 Using the method learned previously. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26.The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values.

you create a schedule for the supply air system project. for Select available fields from. click Training Files. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . For Name.12 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements.rvt. Click OK.Space Fill is the active view. select Spaces. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. In this exercise. For Phase. In the next exercise. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . more category options are available. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. Select Schedule building components. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. select New Construction. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. select Spaces. enter Space Airflow Schedule.

Select Ascending. for Formula. Header. select Not Between. Select Formula. Click OK. and then click Conditional Format. select Air Flow. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. and click OK. select Level. select Level. and then click . ■ Click Calculated Value.■ Under Available fields. select Calculated Supply Airflow. For Discipline. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. select Airflow Delta. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. In the Fields dialog. select HVAC.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. In the Schedule Properties dialog. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. enter Airflow Delta. and then select Hidden field. For Fields. For Formula. select Number. and Blank line. For Then by. For Type. click (Browse). Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. In the Calculated Value dialog. enter . ■ ■ Using the method learned previously.

click the color swatch. For Background Color. Under Conditions to Use. ■ The schedule displays. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. a view opens that contains the selected space. In the next lesson. In the Color dialog. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow.■ ■ ■ For Value. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that Show is highlighted. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. In later exercises. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. Click OK twice. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. right-click to access schedule properties. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. In this exercise. select red. and click OK. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 .

78 .

Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. 79 . IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. In this lesson. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. and work with the airflow schedule. you will create supply air systems. Then. you modify air terminal parameters. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. As you place the air terminals. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. After completing the air systems lesson. After system creation.

zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. click Training Files. the space crossing lines display. indicating that it’s the active view. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and scroll to space 223. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i. 3 In the ceiling view. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. When you highlight a space using the cursor.rvt. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser.

NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. 13 On the Options Bar. the hosted elements are updated as well. verify that Constrain is cleared. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly.Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown. and press Enter. and then press Esc to end the command. and press Enter. 15 On the Options Bar. type 12.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. and select Supply Diffuser .Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 .Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . which in this case is the ceiling grid. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space.Rectangular Face Round Neck . 9 On the Placement panel. 17 Move the cursor down. The schedule updates with the new flow data. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. If the host element is modified or moved. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. for Flow. click Place on Face. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. Also. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . select the diffuser. enter 425 CFM. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. and then select both Copy and Multiple.

navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag. and then press Esc. click Yes. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. 27 Select Return Diffuser .rfa. 29 Place 2 diffusers. as shown. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. 24 In the Open dialog. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 21 On the Options Bar. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. 22 In the drawing area. clear Leader. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. As you place the return diffusers. and click Open. select one of the diffusers. Next. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM. click Place on Face. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 25 In the drawing area. 28 On the Placement tab.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down.

under Other. and click OK. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. Level. and click to select the lines.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 32 In the Project Browser. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. click Yes. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. select Strong Reference. for Reference. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. 31 In the alert dialog. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. as shown. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. select one of the return diffusers.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References. 44 Zoom in to space 115. enter 9' 0"2750. For the start point. click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . for Constraints ➤ Offset. click the Level 1 line. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. ■ ■ For the end point. Verify that the measured distance is 9'. and click OK. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog.

and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 4 If the System Browser title is Zones.rvt.Press Esc. You then create the logical connection between the system components. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. However. including energy analysis. the space crossing lines display. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. and click View ➤ Systems. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. In this exercise. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . right-click the title. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. In the left pane of the Open dialog. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry.Design is highlighted. After creating the logical connection. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.HVAC Plan . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. click Training Files. When you highlight a space.

These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. 12 In the System Browser. the number of elements is updated. Connect Into. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. 15 Click Cancel. As you add diffusers to systems. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. 6 Keep the System Browser open. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. On the Options Bar. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. review the Number of Elements. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. 11 In the drawing area. and Flow value. System Name.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab.

under Mechanical. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. In this exercise. Rename the system Next. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. 26 Click Finish Editing System. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. 25 Click OK. and the system connects them. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. 18 Click OK. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. which updates the name in the System Browser. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. for System Name. the air terminals are the children. under Identity Data. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. In this exercise. 22 Click OK.17 Using the method learned previously. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. for Mark.

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. In this case. Also.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . click Training Files. the Network type provides several solutions.rvt. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. which provides various layout tools. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 On the Options Bar. A Generate Layout tab displays.Design is highlighted. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and display solution 1. for Solution Type. select the upper left diffuser. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch).HVAC Plan. 4 In the drawing area. select Network. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. indicating that it’s the active view. the space crossing lines display. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser.

8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. enter 9' 10 1/2". you’ll get an error in a later step. click Settings. click Modify. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees.7 On the Options Bar. enter 9' 10 1/2". For Duct Type.Round. Select Branch. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . For Duct Type. and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . For Offset. enter 3'. as shown. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. For Maximum Flex Duct Length. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. Click OK. For Offset. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. For Flex Duct Type.

NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. as is the elbow itself. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. or offset elevations are incorrect. For example. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. or manually modify the duct. Either relocate the system components. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification.11 Click Finish Layout. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . select a different layout solution. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added.

Using a flow-based color scheme. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. for Values Displayed. The first time you press Tab. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. fittings. and click to select it. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. under Graphics. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and equipment. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. select Duct Color Fill . a disconnection exists. and click OK. for Color Scheme. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. select By View. highlight a segment of the main duct. Usually. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. You can delete ductwork and the system remains.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. and then click OK. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area.Flow. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. thus it is not part of the system. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. If the entire network does not highlight. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. but not all values are used in this view.

and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. and press Enter. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . for Flow. under Mechanical . Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. for Schemes.Velocity. 26 Click OK. 20 In the drawing area. select one of the diffusers in the system. and click OK. and then press Esc to clear the selection. select the WSHP. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity.Airflow. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals.The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM). decrease the flow value by 100 CFM. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and on the Options Bar. 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. select the color scheme legend. select Duct Color Fill . 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.

Click OK. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). and select 16". Under Constraints.08 in-wg/100ft. and then click to select it. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. Select Only. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. and drag it to the right. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. and enter . you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Select the upper segment of main duct. Select Restrict Height. The ductwork and fittings are updated. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. click Cancel. for Branch Sizing. highlight a segment of the duct. select Friction. select Calculated Size Only.

and pressure loss. pressure. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). static pressure. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. Use the information that displays (flow. Using this tool. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. so that you can modify the system design accordingly.Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow.

click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 36 Close the file with or without saving it. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. also known as the critical path. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. 35 Click Finish. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise.NOTE As you inspect a system. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. and select the WSHP. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors).Design is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers.HVAC Plan . 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. and click Draw Duct. and click to specify the end of the main duct.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location.

and click Draw Duct. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. for Offset.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. select the top right diffuser. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. double-click MEP . Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .8 Press Esc twice to end the command. 14 In the Project Browser. click the corner where the Top. 11 On the Options Bar. 15 On the ViewCube. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. right-click the connector grip. NOTE When drawing duct. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. Front.3D MEP. select 9' 10 1/2".

Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. 22 Using the same method. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. in space 115. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. The ductwork is automatically created. Also. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. it is considered a closed loop. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . 18 Make the floor plan the active view. 19 In the drawing area. the color fill indicates the flow value.16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115.

You can ignore the warning. and select the top left diffuser. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view.Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. 25 Press Esc. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .

Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split).To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. 30 Press Esc twice. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. and click to select it. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . and then click Modify. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct.

and click OK. for Flow. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. clear Restrict Height. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. select a segment of the main duct. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. and then click OK.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. under Mechanical . verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct.Airflow. under Constraints. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. such as a plenum. 40 Using the same method. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 41 Close the file with or without saving it.

or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. In this lesson. and a cooling tower located on the roof. Create return and supply piping systems. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. Then. including 2 base mounted pumps. 109 . This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. Automatically and manually lay out piping. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems.

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i. you place mechanical equipment. In the left pane of the Open dialog. on level 3 of the building model.Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise.rvt. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

in corridor 328. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number.Design is highlighted. and select WSHP .HVAC Plan . indicating that it’s the active view. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . as shown. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. verify that Wall faces is selected.High Efficiency .Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down.2-6 Tons . 7 On the Options Bar. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 .Horizontal . and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component.Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.Left Return . NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .

and enter 2'. verify that the WSHP is still selected. click the top edge of the WSHP.8 Click the corridor wall face. and in the Type Selector.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown. 11 Press Enter and then press Esc. and click to place the dimension. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. as shown. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. 10 Select the WSHP. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click the dimension.

20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. select the 2 WSHPs. Click OK.14 Click Modify. for Offset. as shown. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down. for Water Flow. and click to place it in the mechanical room. enter 9'. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Under Mechanical. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . enter 12 GPM. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump.

A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. including flow and pressure. Create the logical connection between the system components. you create the return and supply piping systems. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.21 Click Modify. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

indicating that it’s the active view. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. analyses cannot be performed.Mech 330). You can create pipes to connect system components. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i. click Training Files. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Piping System | 115 . but without a corresponding system. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder.IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. 5 In the System Browser. where it is easier to review the information. right-click the Systems column heading. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. and click View ➤ Piping. Unlike logical connections (systems).Design is highlighted. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space .HVAC Plan . and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline.

select the 2 WSHPs. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. As you assign equipment to systems. select the boiler. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. Therefore. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing.In the System Browser. 12 In the drawing area. for System Name. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Notice that on the Options Bar. Assigning a system component to an existing system. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. and the Edit System tool is not active. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. while pressing Ctrl. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. 10 On the Options Bar. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. This display indicates that the system is selected. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems.

21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 19 In the Project Browser. double-click Roof .13 Click Finish Editing System. for System Name.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. under Design ➤ HVAC . 17 On the Options Bar. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously.HVAC Plan . (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Creating a Piping System | 117 . 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system.Design. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. and select the cooling tower. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. You have created the hydronic return system.

indicating the logical connection. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. the boiler supplies heated water to the system.22 In the Select Connector dialog. 25 Select the boiler. select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. and bypasses the cooling tower. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. and click Expand All. expand the Hydronic Return system category. 28 Using the same method. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 29 Right-click CHWS. In cooling mode. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. and click OK. In heating mode. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). 23 Close the roof plan view. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. and click Select. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. 26 Click Finish Editing System. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment.

32 In the System Browser. and click OK. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. and click Column Settings. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. and click OK. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. and click Properties. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. for Water Flow. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. expand Piping. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. including the flow rate and size of the component. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter 18 GPM. you can view several parameters. under Mechanical. You also manually modify the layout path as required.In the System Browser. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system.

Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. select CHWR.rvt. 5 In the Filter dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. When you draw a box to select components. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. click Training Files. press Tab to highlight the system. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. you can place the cursor over a system component.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . the boiler.Mech 330). You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. 10 Click OK. indicating that it’s the active view. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). A system preview displays in red. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. and click to select it.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. click Check None.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i. then the Select a System dialog displays. 9 In the Select a System dialog. select Mechanical Equipment. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.Design is highlighted. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .HVAC Plan . 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing.

■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . structural beams. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. It does not reference the architecture. verify that Solutions is selected. click Settings. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. For Inset. select Perimeter. or architectural components. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. 13 Click Cancel. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''.11 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. enter 1' 6''. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. duct.

and the flow for the other is 12. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. With each Tab.16 Click Finish Layout. the flow for one WSHP is 18. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 18 Place the cursor over the piping. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. and press Tab 3 times. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. to display the path with thinner lines. 19 In the drawing area. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. 17 Optionally.

24 Press Esc. 22 Select the boiler. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. and click OK. verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. under Mechanical. and access its instance properties. and click OK.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. 23 Under Mechanical.

31 Close the Level 1 plan view. click Edit System. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. which propagates flow throughout the system.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. you physically close the CHWR loop.Design. 27 On the System Tools panel. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. 32 Click Finish Editing System. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. On the Options Bar.HVAC Plan . Logically.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Next. the Number of Elements is now 8. 28 In the Project Browser. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . double-click Level 1 . and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down.

and then close the Instance Properties dialog. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. as shown. access its instance properties. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. select a WSHP. and click Cancel. note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. under Mechanical. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. 35 Using the drag control. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 .34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. 38 Using the same method.

126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. For Slope. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution.40 In the Select a System dialog. enter 0''/12''. Click Settings. and then click OK. enter 1' 6''. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. select CHWS. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. select Perimeter 1 of 5. For Inset. 41 Click OK. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset.

47 In the drawing area.) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. 48 While pressing Ctrl.The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. as shown. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. (Both sections are at the same elevation. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 . as shown. 46 Click Modify. In a later exercise. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay).

you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved.50 Using the same method. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). 51 Click Finish Layout. To create the piping system. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. Add piping to close the supply loop. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. or offset elevations are incorrect. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. select a different layout solution. or manually modify the pipe. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. Either relocate the system components. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise.

Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . indicating that it’s the active view. as shown. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation.Design ➤ 3D Views. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple.NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i.rvt. As you work in the training file. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. double-click 3D HVAC Building.Design is highlighted. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and the return pipes are magenta.HVAC Plan . 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser.

draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. as shown. 7 In the plan view.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. select the section of piping. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 6 Press Delete.

Click to specify the reference point. and press Esc to clear the selection. ■ Click to move the piping.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. select the boiler. 9 In the 3D view. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . ■ Move the cursor up 4''. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.

132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. select the boiler. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. 11 In the Select Connector dialog. and click OK. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. and the lower one is secondary. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. The connections are automatically created. and click Draw Pipe. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). select the return pipe riser. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. 12 In the 3D view. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In. 13 In the plan view.

and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. Add another 2' section of pipe to the right. enter 2'. and you select 1 connector. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. and press Enter. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . enter 1' . ■ ■ On the Options Bar. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments.7''. for Offset.In a plan view. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. ■ Move the cursor down. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel.

it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and the appropriate fittings are created. As you place piping runs that are close together. as shown. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. and select it. 21 In the Select Connector dialog.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. select the primary base mounted pump. 19 In the plan view. and click OK. 18 Press Esc twice. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew.

you select the tee fitting. and when the connector point displays. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. 27 Move the cursor to the right. 29 If necessary.24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . and click Draw Pipe. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. and click to draw the pipe. 28 Press Esc. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. right-click the bottom connector. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. click to connect to the pump. and click the minus symbol.

right-click the discharge connector. and click to create the pipe. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. for Offset. enter 4'. 31 On the Options Bar. and click Draw Pipe.Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. select the primary base mounted pump. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 33 Press Esc.

these pipe connections were created automatically. as shown. 35 Using the method learned previously. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. 3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view.Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector.

■ ■ On the Options Bar. enter 9' 6''. right-click the bottom control on the tee. and click Draw Pipe. ■ Move the cursor down. and click to create the pipe. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and press Enter. type 1'. for Offset.36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view.

and click Element Properties. you validate the flow through the system. Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. right-click. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe.37 Click Modify. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . You now have a closed loop system. Next.

and click Element Properties. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. In the Instance Properties dialog. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. notice that Flow is 125 GPM. 41 Using the same method. under Mechanical. under Mechanical. When you create the pumps in parallel. Connect the cooling tower Next. for Cooling Water Flow. as shown. right-click. the value is 0 GPM. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet).39 In the Instance Properties dialog. 46 Press Esc. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). 42 Click OK. 40 Click Cancel. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. and click OK. 43 Press Esc. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. The flow is being propagated through the piping. view the properties for the secondary pump. 44 In the 3D view. 48 In the plan view. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%.50 or 50% of the Flow. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. select the cooling tower. notice that under Mechanical.

■ Lower pipe (outlet). Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . 49 Press Esc. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system.

51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM. 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .rvt. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. the water bypasses the cooling tower. Adding Valves In this exercise. and is heated by the boiler. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). When the valve is open. and close the dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select the cooling tower. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode.50 In the 3D View.

2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. Adding Valves | 143 . 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. The bypass valve is closed by default.Design is highlighted. verify that the Diameter value is 3''. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.HVAC Plan . 8 Press Esc twice. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . as shown.Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. indicating that it’s the active view. and select Ball Valve . NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. 12 Select Ball Valve . 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 14 Using the same method.10 Press Esc. place another Ball Valve .2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. parallel to the previously placed valve.2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down.

For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower).2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down.Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. Adding Valves | 145 . For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. and click OK. under Mechanical. 20 Select the bypass valve. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. and select Ball Valve . You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. and click Element Properties. 19 Using the same method. validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). and select Ball Valve . 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. right-click. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve.2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. verify that Flow is 0 GPM. In heating mode. (This valve allows the water to flow through it.

click Training Files.Design is highlighted. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM.22 Using the method you just learned. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. as shown. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters.HVAC Plan . Initially. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM. indicating that it’s the active view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping.rvt. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing.

4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. and click OK. and click OK. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. click Pipe Color Fill .Flow. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. select Pipe Color Fill .Size. Sizing Pipe | 147 . for Schemes. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.

and enter 2. Select And. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Click OK. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. for Branch Sizing. 13 Press Esc. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. Under Constraints. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment).Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. select Friction. and for Velocity. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. and click to select the branch. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. enter 5 FPS.25 FT/100ft.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. select a different layout solution. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level.Design ➤ 3D Views.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. and double-click 3D HVAC Building. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i. 14 Close the file with or without saving it. pressure. Inspecting the System In this exercise. or manually modify the pipe. Using the System Inspector. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Either relocate the system components. or offset elevations are incorrect. Inspecting the System | 149 .rvt. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow.

as required. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. This information helps you modify the system design. An inspection flag reports the section number. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. and pressure information including pressure loss. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . flow.3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector.

inspect Section 6 again.67 psi.89 psi. 9 Using the same method. targeting those systems that need attention. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project.88 psi. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7. In this exercise.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1. and to size pipe. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. 10 Click Finish. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. for Fluid Temperature. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. select 90° F. and the Pressure Loss is 1. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM. you need to validate them. and click OK. Checking Piping Systems | 151 . 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open. the Static Pressure is 7. as shown.

double-click Level 1 . 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. 7 In the System Browser. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. As you learned when placing components. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. thus assigning the components to a system. and double-click Level 3 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . For example. NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). the pipe is associated with that system. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. right-click the Systems titlebar.HVAC Plan . 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. 9 Right-click CHWS.Design.Design. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. After you have assigned all components to systems.rvt. If you place components without assigning them to a system. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. and click Show to view all of the system components.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings.HVAC Plan . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. and click View. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder.Design ➤ Floor Plans. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. 6 In the Project Browser. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. and for pipe sizing. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. click Training Files. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. 4 In the System Browser. In the System Browser. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. Warnings display. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. After you assign components to a system. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors).

confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. 12 In the System Browser. 10 Using the same methods. and confirm unassigned system components. 13 Right-click CHWR. 14 Using the methods that you learned. and select Level 3 . 15 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components.Design floor plan.HVAC Plan . The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. click Close. expand the Unassigned folder. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. and click Expand All. right-click Hydronic Return. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . otherwise. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views.TIP If you have multiple views open.

154 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. 155 .

156 .

You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. Define required lighting. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 . Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system.

Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. You also add a wiring type. click Training Files. For Temperature. ■ ■ For Material. wiring. select 90. distribution systems. select 75.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. For Temperature Rating.04. select Wiring Types. enter THHN. ■ Click New Correction Factor. expand Wiring . 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . As you place components and create circuits. enter 1. For Material. select Copper. In this exercise you review electrical settings. select Copper. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i.rvt. Click OK. Select Correction Factor. ■ ■ For Factor. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click (Open). 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings.Wire Sizes. speeding up the design phase. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and demand factors that are applied in the design. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

16 Close the file with or without saving it. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. select Red. enter -5 fc and 5 fc. for Custom Colors. Click OK three times. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Click Background Color. The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red.■ ■ For Value.

Create power loads. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. Then. as you place lighting fixtures. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. Create a panel schedule. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. power circuits. 167 . First. Use the System Browser to check your design.

00 fc. 2 In the drawing area.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Training Files.rvt.00 fc. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click OK. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes.Lighting Color Fill view is open. Under Scheme Definition. select the color legend. for Basic Colors. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You can create additional color schemes. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. click (Open). 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. select the color for Less Than 20. In the Color dialog. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. select Orange. for the Spaces Category. select Average Estimated Illumination. By using orange as the color for this range.

Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view.277. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. which is the lowest value in the specified range. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc.5 fc range.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. zoom to space Library 219. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. The red field will clear once the +/.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field.Lighting Ceiling plan. 13 Click the Level 2 . 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 . The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 . 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) . The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. 8 In the Project Browser.7 In the Project Browser. all three of these colored fields will clear to white.5 fc range is satisfied.

23 Click OK. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. the fixtures will move accordingly. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule.The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 25 On the Options Bar. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 20 Select the lighting fixture. select Multiple. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Click to place the fixture.

28 In the drawing area. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 .NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 27 Press ESC to end the command. select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 30 On the Options Bar. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown. select Multiple.

Note the value in red for the space Library 219. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures. 33 Click to activate the Schedule window. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .32 Press ESC.

36 In the Filter dialog. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . 37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) . Click OK.277V. select Lighting Fixtures. click Check None. and for Category.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.

38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .The values in the schedule are updated automatically. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

Note the changes for the space Library 219.277V. click the ceiling grid line as shown. The lighting delta is satisfied. 40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. select Multiple Alignment. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 .39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) . 42 In the drawing area. 41 On the Options Bar.

43 Click the left edge of the first fixture. 44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures. The fixture aligns. 176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise.rvt. click Training Files. you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. In the next exercise. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 . 46 Close the file with or without saving it. click (Open).45 Press ESC to end the command. you modify the light fixture IES files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.

4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view.Lighting Plan.Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown.Lighting Color Fill plan. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. 2 Tile the views as shown. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type. Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 . scroll to view space space Library 219. 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

select Xenon and click OK. enter . Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. for Apparent Load.93. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. click the value for Initial Intensity. click the value for Initial Color. ■ In the Initial Color dialog.ies and click Open. specify 15000. click the value for Light Loss Factor.85. Note the lighting type has changed to F14. Click OK. ■ Under Photometrics.■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate.00 VA. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . and click OK. for Ballast Loss Factor. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 . select T5 [HO]. select 463T5_S. In the Name dialog. enter F15. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads. Under Identity Data. Under Electrical. select Luminous Flux. for Lamp. Under Photometrics. ■ Click Apply. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. enter .277V and click OK. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown. for Type Mark. enter 162. ■ Click OK twice. Under Photometrics. In the Select File dialog. Under Photometrics.00 lm. for Color Preset. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation.

and for Category. 10 In the Filter dialog. Click OK. 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures. select Lighting Fixtures. and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated. 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click Check None. 11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W .9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated.277V. Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown.

Press Delete. 15 In space Library 219. 16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. select the top center fixture. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 . Note the lighting delta updates again.

Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again.

Placing Switches. click Training Files. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. 2 In the drawing area. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Junction Boxes. and receptacles to your design. and Receptacles | 183 .Press Delete. Placing Switches. junction boxes.rvt. you add switches. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. click (Open). Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Junction Boxes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project.

it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor . 7 Click to place the switch.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .277V.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.

NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown.rfa and click Open. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. Junction Boxes. 12 In the Load Family dialog. and Receptacles | 185 . 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. Placing Switches. The element type Junction Boxes . Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. Select Junction Boxes .NoLoad. 9 Press ESC to end the command.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . note that Apparent Load is set to 0. zoom to space Library 219. Click OK twice. Click Edit Type. enter 9’0”. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . In the Type Properties dialog. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.14 Press ESC to end the command. NOTE When entering values. Under Electrical. for Mark. enter JB-1NL. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. note the Number of Poles is 1. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. 15 Select the junction box. 21 In the drawing area. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. for Level 2 . 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open.Offset.

Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. Space Name. NOTE If necessary. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. 24 For any column. Distribution System. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. Space Number. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. Expand Electrical. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. 23 In the System Browser. and Number of Elements. 26 In the System Browser. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Select Size. Select Load. and Voltage. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. Expand General. Placing Switches. right-click and click Column Settings. Click OK. Junction Boxes. and Receptacles | 187 .22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.

188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 31 Close the System Browser. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown.

and Receptacles | 189 . Placing Switches. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 38 Select the receptacle. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. select Copy and Multiple. 40 On the Options Bar. Junction Boxes. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter.

and enter 12’ and press ENTER. 42 Move the cursor down. enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle.41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. move the cursor along the wall. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

43 Press ESC to end the command. and Receptacles | 191 . Placing Switches. Junction Boxes.

45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

you need to create logical connections to define the topology. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire.48 Close the file with or without saving it.

and work toward the higher voltage. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. 2 In the drawing area. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .rvt. click (Open). then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created.equipment. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i. Adding wiring to a project is optional. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. zoom to the space Electrical 220. click Training Files.

For Panel Name. for Max. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 7 Press ESC to end the command. select 480/277 Wye. select 120/208 Wye.Surface: 100A.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 14 Select the panelboard. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. Click OK.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. enter PP-2B. 9 On the Options Bar.Loads. 15 On the Options Bar. for Distribution System. for Distribution System. 8 Select the panelboard. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . #1 Pole Breakers. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. enter 20.

Loads. and for Category. enter LP-2B. enter 20. zoom to space Instruction 221. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. for Max. which is the logical connection between the elements. For Panel Name. #1 Pole Breakers. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. 20 In the drawing area. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures.17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . Click OK. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click Check None. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. Click OK. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 23 In the Filter dialog.

27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 .

198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .28 Press ESC to end the command. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 33 Select the switch on the right. 31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way. 32 Press ESC.

36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit.34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . 35 Select the left three-way switch. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit.

40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. for Hot Conductors. select Wires. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. click Check None. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Next you create circuits without showing wire. click (Open). except without wire. 41 In the Filter dialog.37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.Loads. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4. and for Category. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . enter 2. 38 Press ESC to end the command. Click OK. Click OK. 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221.

Distribution System. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.rvt. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . right-click on the Systems heading. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. and Voltage Drop are selected. Rating. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. and verify that Load. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. ■ 16 In the System Browser. and then expand circuit 1. Voltage. Click OK. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. 2 In the drawing area. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. click Training Files. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Expand Electrical. 13 In the System Browser. expand Power. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i.

30 Close the System Browser. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. Click OK. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 22 With the junction box still selected. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. change the Voltage to 277V. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. under Electrical. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog.

click below the first one to place it. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family.Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. Click Yes. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . 47 In the drawing area. 40 Click OK twice. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. under Identity Data. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. enter FR4. Click OK. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. Click Tags. click Edit Type. 35 Press ESC to end the command. note the label parameters and click Cancel. for Type Mark. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. 36 Select the upper-left fixture.

61 Close the file with or without saving it. 52 In the Save As dialog. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. select Break. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . 56 In the Filter dialog. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. for File Name. select Lighting Fixture Tags. Click Save. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. click Check None. Deselect Break and for Suffix. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. enter a comma. and click Apply. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. Click OK. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. Click OK. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. Next you create a switch system. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. For Circuit Number. and for Category.rfa.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. Click OK.

enter a. 2 In the drawing area. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. Creating a Switch System | 205 .Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. click (Open). 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i. click Training Files. for Switch ID. under Electrical Lighting. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. Click OK.

17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. Click OK. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID.Lighting. for switch ID. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. enter b. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. under Electrical .

Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.rvt. select Electrical Fixtures. click Check None. and for Category. click Training Files. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. select the PP-2B panel. Creating Power Loads | 207 . lighting. click (Open). The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. 4 In the Filter dialog. 2 In the drawing area. Next you create a circuit and size wire. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. Circuits are used for power. and data systems. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 In space Electrical 220.26 Close the file with or without saving it. Click OK.

navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. and click Open. Click OK. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. under Electrical .rfa. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. and click Element Properties.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and in the drawing area. 15 In the Load Family dialog. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. select Long Wire Tick Mark. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog.Loads. 13 Select the wire again. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. select Wiring. 19 Click OK. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. for Hot Conductors. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. and in the right pane. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. enter 2. select Hook Wire Tick Mark.

press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. as shown. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 22 In space Electrical 220. and click to select the circuit. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222.The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. select the PP-2B panel. Creating Power Loads | 209 .

as shown. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. 29 In space Instruction 221. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns.26 Press Delete. click the connector of the first receptacle. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. 28 In the drawing area. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. in space Instruction 221. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. 2 In the drawing area. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. select panel LP-2B. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222.rvt. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Open. Finally. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. zoom to space Electrical 220. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. click Training Files. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you balance the loads for your design. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. 3 In the Electrical space. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i.

10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. 14 Close the warning dialog. 1-#10. click Rebalance Loads. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. Phase B 3636 VA. for Rating. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. Scroll down.4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. B. 1-#10. enter 30A.3712 VA. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Under Electrical-Loads. 1-#12. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. and Phase C provides 2028 VA. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. 12 Select panel PP-2B. Notice that the loads on Phase A. 1-#12.3616 VA). 6 Click OK. while Phase B provides 2004 VA. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. Click OK. and Phase C . and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A.

24 Select the transformer TP-2B.15 Select panel PP-2B. The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i.Loads.Loads.rvt. 17 Close the warning dialog. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. under Electrical . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. under Electrical . Next you create a panel schedule. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Select PP-2B. click (Open). 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. Click OK. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. and click OK. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. for Rating. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. and click OK. for Rating. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. enter 30A. enter 25A. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. click Training Files. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Under Body Text. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. enter 1/8. select Bold and Italic. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select Berlin Sans FB. 6 In the Project Browser.Panel Schedules. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. click Training Files. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. for Font. click Edit. Under Header Text. under Other. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. 5 In the Project Browser. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. Under Header Text. click (Open). The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. expand Sheets (all). and open E601 .NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. for Appearance. 7 Select the schedule. for Font Size. 4 Close the report. enter 3/32. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. for Font Size. 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text.rvt. 11 Click OK twice. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog.

each with a load of 180VA. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. In the System Browser. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. press TAB once. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. In the System Browser. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. Checking Your Design | 215 . Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. Expand Unassigned. note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. select space Lounge 212. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once.

19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. for Panel. 20 On the Options Bar. select MDP-1. 15 In the dialog. zoom to space Electrical 214. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. under Warnings. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. 18 Select panel LP-2C.14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. 17 In the drawing area. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. 16 Close the details dialog. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.

217 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial.

218 .

In this exercise. click Training Files. In this lesson. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. planning is critical to a successful design. and click OK. right-click PVC .Design ➤ Floor Plans. and verify that Level 1 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Properties. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . in addition to loading existing families. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Adding a pipe size. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type.Design is open. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan.Plumbing Plan . 3 In the Type Properties dialog. 2 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Name dialog. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. you create a PVC pipe type. click Duplicate.rvt. type PVC . expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. 219 . You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems.Vent.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project.Sanitary.

select Sanitary.PVC . 26 Click OK. for Pipe Connector Tolerance.PVC . click Training Files. click Modify. for Nominal. Cross. select Branch. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes.DWV. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. 15 For System Type. enter 10°. enter 5/8''. For Offset.0''.Sch 40 .Sch 40 . enter 27/32''. select Sanitary. select Tee Vent . 25 For Outside. select None. Tap. 6 Click OK. select Tee Reducing Double Vent .Vent is listed.5 In the Type Properties dialog. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 24 For Inside Diameter.DWV: Standard. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System .Sch 40 . Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. enter -4' . verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. In the Project Browser. 17 In the left pane. and click Main. select Tee. enter 1/2''. 13 In the right panel. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. and click OK. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog.PVC . 18 For System Type. under Pipe Types. 10 On the Selection panel. PVC . under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. select Plastic. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. click Pipe Settings. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. 27 For the new pipe size.DWV: Standard. for Material. 22 Click New Size. and open Imperial\Families\Trap P . 21 In the right pane. Tee. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. under Mechanical.rfa. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary.

Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. add a hot water heater. vent. 221 . Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. and hot and cold water piping.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. Create the hot water system. Create the cold water system. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. including plumbing fixtures. Create the sanitary plumbing system. sanitary piping. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 1 urinal. including the men’s room (space Male 107).Design is open. NOTE To identify a space name and number.rvt. and verify that Level 1 .Plumbing Plan . as shown. 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan.Design ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i. Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. you add 2 toilets. and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.

Flush Valve .6 gpf. select Public . 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space.The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. against the left wall. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 . under Water Closet . centered on the bottom horizontal reference line. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 5 On the Placement panel. in the Type Selector.Wall Mounted.1. 4 On the Element panel. 1 wall-mounted urinal. as shown. and 3 sinks.

select 3/4'' Flush Valve.) 8 Press Esc. and press Esc. Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector. under Urinal .7 Click to place another toilet. above the first in the standard toilet space. zoom in closer. (Again. use the reference line to center the fixture. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line. 224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Wall Hung. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces.

2'' Drain. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 .Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector. 14 Click Modify.Rectangular. 12 On the Placement panel. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas). you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. under Floor Drain . click Place on Face. In placing the fixture. select 5''x5'' Strainer .

19 Expand Default Sanitary. In this exercise. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. and review the components listed under this system. right-click in the System Browser table heading. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 17 If all disciplines are displayed.rvt. 16 Click the title bar for the browser. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. click Training Files. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i. 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. and click View ➤ Piping. and a floor drain. a urinal. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. and Default Domestic Cold Water.

Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. and click OK. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 6 In the plan view.Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Filter dialog.Plumbing Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans. draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room. Only plumbing fixtures are selected. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design is open. clear Lines (<Overhead>). 2 In the Project Browser. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner. and verify that Level 1 . Creating a Sanitary System | 227 .

9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. so the Create Sanitary System is available. and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. 13 In the Systems Browser. click Finish Editing System. enter Sanitary 107. You include the bathroom space number in the name. for System Name. 11 On the Options Bar. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. expand Sanitary. 12 On the Edit System panel. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system. If you deselected the drain. 228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . the Create Cold Water System option would also be available.

at the midpoint of the detail lines. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. 16 In the Select a System dialog. A preview of the piping layout displays. select Sanitary 107. for example. The base is placed. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . and click OK. a toilet. as shown. select one of the components in the system. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.

The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. enter -4'-0”. 26 On the Options Bar. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. and click OK. select Branch. for Slope. for Solution Type. click Solutions. You accept this suggested solution. 21 On Options Bar. for Offset. and click Settings. 27 Click Modify. select Intersections.19 On the Options Bar. for Diameter. The default settings are automatically modified. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. enter -1' 0''. and for Offset. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. select Main. 25 On the Options Bar. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. 23 For Offset. enter 1/8'' / 12''. select 4''. 24 In the left pane. and modify it to meet project requirements. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter -1' 0''.

29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). Creating a Sanitary System | 231 .Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl. select the vertical route path segments. and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point.

use the ViewCube to orient the view. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main.30 In the 3D view. 31 Click Modify. as shown. 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. as shown. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

click Finish Layout. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 .33 Using the previous method. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. 34 On the Generate Layout panel.

and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view. select the fitting and click to reorient it. 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . When a fitting is reversed.

as shown. you continue with the work from the last exercise. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . 38 Close the file with or without saving it. and check the slope control. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. adding sinks in the men’s room.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). 5 On the Placement panel. click Training Files. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line. select 22''x22'' . and verify that Level 1 .rvt. as shown.Public. under Lavatory . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture.Design is open. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected.Design ➤ Floor Plans. in the Type Selector. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i.Rectangular. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser.Plumbing Plan .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 4 On the Element panel.

in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. On the Options Bar. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . 8 Select the sink. For example. enter 2' 4''. TIP When entering dimensions. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. without having to enter ' and '' symbols. and press Enter to create a second sink. ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. select Multiple.7 Click Modify. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point.

and press Enter to create the third sink. click Finish Editing System. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 16 On the Edit System panel. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 11 In the System Browser. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 15 Click the 3 sinks. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 12 In the drawing area. click Add To System.■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. Press Esc.

19 In the 3D view. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 20 Select the fitting. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.In the System Browser. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). as shown. 22 In the plan view. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. under Design ➤ Plumbing . with the tee fitting selected. 21 Select the tee. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system.Design ➤ 3D Views. and click Draw Pipe. use the ViewCube to orient the view. double-click 3D Plumbing.

press Spacebar. 24 On the Options Bar. for Slope.6''. for Offset. In this example. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. 26 On the Options Bar. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green. 27 Click Modify. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. When you press the Spacebar. enter 2' . and click Apply.23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. and click to draw the pipe. enter 1/8'' / 12''.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks.Sch 40 . 30 In the 3D view. and when the vertical center line displays. select Standard. under Wye 45 Deg Double .DWV.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 31 Click Modify. 29 In the Type Selector.PVC . move the cursor over the stub pipe. 32 Select the double wye fitting. click to place the fitting.

enter 6''. you add pipe segments to the double wye. double-click the section head to open the section view. 36 In the section view.33 With the fitting selected. enter 1'. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. and press Enter. and click Draw Pipe. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. In the next steps. right-click the right connector. 37 Select the fitting. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 34 Press Esc. zoom in to the double wye fitting. on the Options Bar. and press Enter. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. for Offset.

42 Click Modify. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. as shown. 40 Click Modify. and click to place the pipe. 41 Using the same method. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°).Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool.

draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 48 Click Modify. 49 Using the same method. 46 In the section view. and press Esc. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. press Spacebar. and click Draw Pipe. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. right-click the bottom connector.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. 47 Move the cursor down. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. enter 6''.

51 In the Type Selector.PVC .50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. select Standard. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. 55 In the 3D view. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected.DWV. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps.Sch 40 . select the P-Trap on the left. 53 Using the same method. under Trap P . 54 Click Modify. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. 56 Using the same method. 52 In the plan view.

right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . connect the right sink to the double wye.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. 58 Using the same method. and click Draw Pipe. In the plan view. Click Modify. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. Move the cursor to the left. and press Enter. enter 6''.. select the left P-Trap. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. Select the double wye pipe on the left. Click in the plan view.

select PVC Sanitary. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. Press Esc. click Finish to select the recommended solution. and select a proposed solution. while pressing Ctrl. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. as shown. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. under Pipe Types. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. In the Type Selector. On the Routing Solutions panel. while pressing Ctrl. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 .■ In the 3D view. select the section of pipe you just drew.

and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i. click Finish. In the left pane of the Open dialog.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. and verify the slope. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. 62 On the Options Bar. 63 On the Slope Editor panel.rvt. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. for Slope. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. adjusting the sanitary stack.

9 In the Type Selector. 7 On the Selection panel. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . as shown. and click to draw the pipe. select the elbow fitting on the right. under Wye Combination with 8th Bend .Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Section view.DWV. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 10 In the 3D view. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. click Modify.Overall.PVC . select Standard.Sch 40 . and click Draw Pipe.Design. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 5 Select the tee. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing.Floor level line.Plumbing Plan . Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. and click the intersection to place the fitting.Design. right-click the top connector. select the vertical stack. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 .

and click the rotate control to change the orientation. 18 In the plan view.11 Click Modify. Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 17 In the Type Selector. 13 Click the rotate control once. click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe. enter 1'-0”. under Plug . 14 On the Options Bar. select Standard. 12 Select the fitting.Sch 40 . as shown.DWV. for Offset.PVC . 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 15 Press Esc.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i. you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.19 Click Modify. click Training Files.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and verify that Level 1 .rvt.Design is open. Creating the Cold Water System | 251 . 20 Close the file with or without saving it. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout.Plumbing Plan . Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise.

and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. select Domestic Cold Water. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. and for System Type. if necessary. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for System Type. select Branch. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors.Overall. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type. select Pipe Types: Water. expand Unassigned. and click OK.Design ➤ 3D Views. 6 In the left pane. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector. click Check None. and click Main. select Branch. For Offset. select Main. and sinks. To minimize opportunities for piping interference.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 7 In the left pane. enter 9' 3''. select Domestic Hot Water. select Plumbing Fixtures. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. select Domestic Hot Water. under Design ➤ Plumbing . 17 In the Filter dialog. 14 In the System Browser. 4 In the right pane. draw a selection box to select the toilets. 15 In the plan view. double-click 3D Plumbing .) 10 Click OK. For Offset. urinal. select Pipe Types: Water. verify that the value is 9' 0''. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. minimize the Sanitary system. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 9 In the left pane. for System Type.

notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view. 21 On the Edit System panel. click Finish Editing System. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 . For Flow Conversion Method. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. Notice that the water main displays in blue. click Edit System. enter DCW 107. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. In the System Browser.18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. 19 On the System Tools panel. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected.

for Offset. as shown. select 3/4''. 32 Move the cursor to the right. enter 7''. and press Enter. 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter. enter 10'. enter 0”/12”.25 Using the same method. select the sink above the urinal. 31 On the Options Bar. 33 Click Modify. 37 On the Options Bar. right-click the top DCW connector. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 35 In the Type Selector. 30 In the plan view. and press Enter. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. For Offset. select Water. 36 Move the cursor to the left. as shown. 34 In the plan view. for Offset. For Slope. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. under Pipe Types. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. enter 4'0”. and click the connector. at the intersection of the water main pipe. and click Draw Pipe. enter 3' .2 7/8''. connect the second toilet. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click to place the pipe. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 28 In the Type Selector. click to the left of the urinal.

(Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]).39 Move the cursor to the left. and click to connect to the main cold water line. The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping. and click OK. 42 In the Select Connector dialog. select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe. 40 Click Modify. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 41 Select the top sink. Creating the Cold Water System | 255 .

256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.44 Using the same method. Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise. you create the hot water system. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system. add a water heater.

while pressing Ctrl.Overall. and verify that Level 1 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.rvt. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. Creating the Hot Water System | 257 . click Training Files. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. expand the Unassigned folder. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 6 In the plan view. 2 In the Project Browser.Plumbing Plan .Design is open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i. select the 3 sinks. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing . 5 In the System Browser.

8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 15 In the System Browser. When designing systems. Default Domestic Cold Water.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. In later steps. 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. you edit the system to add equipment. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. verify that DCW 107 is selected. 12 In the Type Selector. the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. Default Domestic Hot Water. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater. enter Domestic Hot Water 107. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 14 Click Modify.6 Gallon. select 0. under Water Heater . as shown. and click OK. and click Edit System. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom. 10 In the System Browser.Tankless. Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. 13 In the plan view. in the Unassigned folder. for System Name.

21 On the Placement Tools panel. Slope: 0''/12''. 23 On the Options Bar. as shown. and click the water main line. and press Enter. 25 On the Options Bar. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. for Offset. 24 Move the cursor up.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 27 Click Modify. and on the Edit System panel. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. 26 Move the cursor to the right. 19 Select the water heater. 22 In the Type Selector. enter 1' 6''. enter 10’. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . Offset: 4' 6''. and select Draw Pipe. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. right-click the middle left connector. click Finish Editing System. select the water heater.

click Finish Editing System.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 30 On the System Tools panel. for Diameter. select 4'-6''. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. and on the Placement Tools panel. 38 Move the cursor to the right. enter 9' 0''. and press Enter. click Edit System. and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 33 On the Edit System panel. select Domestic Hot Water 107. 35 On the Options Bar. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). and click Draw Pipe. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. 36 Move the cursor down. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. for Offset. select a sink. enter 1' 6''. and in the System Selector. enter 1''. as shown. and for Offset. 37 On the Options Bar. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

40 On the Options Bar. and press Enter. enter 2' 8''. for Offset. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 . and click just above the bottom sink. as shown. enter 1’. 41 Move the cursor down. 42 Click Modify.39 Move the cursor down.

and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal).43 In the 3D view. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink.

rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system. 47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .46 Close the file with or without saving it.

264 .

265 .Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.

266 .

After finishing each exercise. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. click Training Files. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. go to http://www. 267 . you can choose to save your work. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. If the tutorial training files are not present. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model.autodesk.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. You create a new pipe type. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. 2 Right-click Standard. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type.rvt. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. In this lesson. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. In this tutorial. However. and click Duplicate. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers.

or architectural components. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. For Offset. and then click OK. select Fire Protection Wet. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. For Offset. verify that 9' 0" is selected. structural beams. Next. 9 Click OK. duct. select Fire Protection Wet. For Pipe Type. verify that 9' 0" is specified. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. for Material. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. under Mechanical. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. In the next exercise. 6 In the Project Browser. For System Type. select Main. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. you modify the type properties of the pipe. For Pipe Type. you create project parameters and work with schedules. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. click Rename. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. and enter Fire Protection Wet. select Carbon Steel. In this exercise. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. For System Type. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). 10 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. However. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. and click Properties. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems.

3 In the Project Parameters dialog. and click Element Properties. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. right-click. select Fire Protection. click Training Files. and then click OK. for Sprinkler Zone. enter Zone 1. For Group parameter under. 6 In the drawing area.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Design is highlighted. under Fire Protection. 5 Click OK twice. click Add.Fire Protection Plan . 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. for Name. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. select the upper half of the building. select space Instruction 221 as shown. indicating that it’s the active view. 8 Using a crossing window. Under Categories. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. select Spaces. enter Sprinkler Zone. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . the space crossing lines display.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . When you highlight a space using the cursor.

and then click OK. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Sprinkler Zone. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. under Fire Protection. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. and then access instance properties. verify that only Spaces are selected. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. 10 In the Filter dialog. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. and then click OK. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. you create schedules for sprinkler design. and click OK. for Sprinkler Zone. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. click Training Files. enter Zone 2. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 13 Using the same method. to which you add various parameters. select Zone 1. under Fire Protection. including a calculated value parameter. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection.

Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. enter 15. For Key name. 14 Select the new header. Click OK. For Type of Parameter. select Spaces. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. For Rounding. select Maximum Spacing. select Length. select Feet and fractional inches. For Name. Select Schedule keys. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. double-click on each column separator. 11 Click OK twice. select Fire Protection. For Group parameter under. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. and click Field Format. 7 Click OK. click the Formatting tab. enter Maximum Spacing.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. select To the nearest 1'. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . enter Light. Obstructed-Combustible. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. click Add Parameter. Click OK. 10 In the Format dialog. 6 Using the same method. The schedule displays. For Units.Fire Protection Plan . 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and on the ribbon. In the Maximum Spacing column.Design is highlighted. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . 9 On the Formatting tab. for Name. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. enter Protection Area Construction Type. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule.

Obstructed-Combustible Extra. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . NOTE The units of measure display automatically. enter 130. enter Sprinkler Schedule. under Available fields. Unobstructed Ordinary. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. 16 Using the same method. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. and press Enter. For Name. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. Click OK. select Spaces.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. Unobstructed Extra. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light.

The Sprinkler Schedule displays. For Discipline.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. For Type. select Area. enter Minimum Sprinklers. 20 On the Formatting tab. For Formula. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. click Edit. select Fixed. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. select Level. under Other. Select Header and Blank line. select Number. select 0 decimal place. and click View Properties. click . 19 Click the Formatting tab. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. In the Fields dialog. For Then by. Click OK. for Sorting/Grouping. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. and click OK. 22 Click OK twice. select Sprinkler Zone. select Common. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . for Sort by. For Units. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. and click Field Format. Enter the formula operator / after Area. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). select Minimum Sprinklers. For Rounding.

For Fields. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then click Field Format. 27 In the drawing area. select Sprinkler Zone. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 30 Click OK twice. and click View Properties. and select Totals only. ■ In the Format dialog. select Level equals Level 2. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. For Then by (second instance). Under Field formatting. select Number. for Filter by. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Grand totals. select Minimum Sprinklers. for Filter. right-click the schedule. click Edit. and then select Hidden field. 26 Click OK 3 times. At the bottom of the dialog. select Level. For Fields. verify that Use default settings is selected. select Hidden field.

and click View Properties. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. Under Field formatting. for Fields. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. select Embedded Schedule. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. and Count. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. select Count. For Category. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. double-click Type. and select Totals only. select Grand totals. On the Formatting tab. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. delete the word Maximum. click Edit. for Embedded Schedule. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. System Name. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. for Available fields. select Calculate totals. select Sprinklers. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . under Other. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2.

Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Ordinary. As a result. under Identity Data. 41 In the plan view. 52 Click OK.Fire Protection Plan Design. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. double-click FP . When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. and the spacing parameter values are evident. select Ordinary. select Light. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 43 Click Cancel. Unobstructed. under Identity Data. but their values are not determined.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. 50 Access the instance properties. select space 221 Instruction. Unobstructed. and click OK. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Protection Area Construction Type. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. 46 With the space still selected. under Identity Data. and access the instance properties. 48 In the floor plan. 44 In the schedule. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. select space 221 Instruction. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). for Protection Area Construction Type. Unobstructed. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

279 . By following the recommended workflow. methodology.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. you will understand the process. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. As you place the sprinklers. If the tutorial training files are not present. At the end of this tutorial. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. and double-click Level 2 . You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i. click Training Files. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. go to http://www. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. As you create the system.rvt. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. After finishing each exercise. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.autodesk. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. However.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. you can choose to save your work.

2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. 3 In the Project Browser. When there is a small misalignment. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . After placing the initial sprinkler. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. When this happens.

because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204. while pressing Ctrl. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face.Pendent . 11 In the drawing area. and click to place 3 sprinklers. 9 In space Instruction 202. as shown. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . 10 Press Esc twice. select the sprinklers that you placed. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. and select Sprinkler .Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down.

Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. 13 On the Options Bar. 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left.12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. verify that Constrain is cleared. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. as shown. Next. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. Also. and then press Esc. you place non-hosted sprinklers. and that Copy and Multiple are selected.

This number is determined in the schedule.FP_Ceiling view. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. enter 14' 6". and press Enter. 19 In the floor plan. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". for Offset. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down.Design. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. specify a vertical offset. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. open Design ➤ FP . Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. 25 Click OK. For Number. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 29 Press Esc. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. you place non-hosted sprinklers. Adding Sprinklers | 283 . under Constraints. 18 Type WT. enter 10' 6".Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. 17 In the Project Browser. 200B. move the cursor to the right. enter 11. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. Notice that the schedule updates.Fire Protection Plan . and 200C). 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. Next. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. and click Element Properties. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. 23 Right-click the sprinkler.Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. you adjust the offset. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met.

click Training Files. Unlike logical connections (systems). you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. However. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. In the next exercise. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. indicating that it’s the active view. and with piping (physical connection). IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system.Fire Protection Plan . and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i. and then creating the logical connection between these system components.30 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. After creating the logical connection. In this exercise.rvt. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods.Design is highlighted. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

5 Right-click the header. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. In the System Browser. named Fire Protection Wet. Creating a Piping System | 285 . Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. as shown.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. and select Piping. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. As you assign sprinklers to systems. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. within the Piping Systems folder. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. click View ➤ Systems. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems.

12 On the Options Bar.Wet is selected. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. 19 Click OK. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and on the Options Bar. The Edit Piping System panel displays. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. select Branch. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 11 With the system still selected. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. Next. verify that 9' 0" is specified. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. 15 In the drawing area. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. and click Select. click Settings. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and select the system. select an initial piping layout. and number of elements in the system. The Generate Layout tools are activated. press Tab. for System Name. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. 13 In the System Browser. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. 14 Click Finish Editing System. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. enter FP Wet_Zone2. For Offset. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. verify that Main is selected. providing system editing tools. For Pipe Type. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. place the cursor over a sprinkler. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. and a piping layout preview displays. indicating the logical connection. In the left pane. system equipment.

In general. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. 22 On the Options Bar. as shown. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. and select solution 5. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. When the layout is finished. select 2". The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell.20 On the Generate Layout panel. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. 23 For Offset. click Solutions. these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. verify that Network is selected. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . and green represents branch lines). click Place Base. enter -12' 0". 24 On the Generate Layout panel. for Diameter.

and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. as shown. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. click Modify. On the Generate Layout panel. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. 29 Click Finish Layout. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . A (parallel movement control) displays. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2.

33 Close the file with or without saving it. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. the Connect Into tool. Next. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. 32 If necessary. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. or that offset elevations are incorrect. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . and then you create piping to physically connect them. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. select a different layout solution. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. and various manual pipe creation tools. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. Either relocate the system components. or manually modify the pipe.IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing.

4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 2 Zoom in. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 If necessary. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.rvt.Fire Protection Plan . indicating that it’s the active view. and select the elbow fitting as shown.Design is highlighted. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i.

mechanical equipment. verify that Network is selected. radiators. 5 In the drawing area. verify that Solutions is selected. 13 Click Finish Layout. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). 11 On the Generate Layout panel. 18 Click Finish Editing System. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. click Add To System. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. 9 On the Edit System panel. 8 In the corridor. or a system component to display system tools. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. and select solution 5. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). and so on) are logically connected by a system. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. for Solution Type. click Finish Editing System. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. you can select the pipe or duct. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. and pipe or duct is created. air terminals. 12 On the Options Bar. 14 Close the System Browser. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system.

22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 27 On the Options Bar. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. and click Draw Pipe. 21 In the Piping Plan. 24 In the Piping Plan.20 Open Design ➤ FP . click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. 29 Using the same method. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe. for Offset. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. 25 Select the sprinkler.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. and then tile the views. and then press Esc. 28 In the drawing area. 23 View the result in the 3D view. select 9'. right-click. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

31 In the plan view. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system.Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. Because the whole system highlights. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 . it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly.

2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping.Fire Protection Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . for Scale.Design is highlighted. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. ■ 6 Press Esc.rvt.Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. double-click on the section head to open the section view. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. select 1/4" = 1'-0". 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

21 On the Options Bar. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . for Diameter. select 4". The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes.

22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. The pipe diameter is modified. select 1 1/4". 26 Using the same method. as shown. 24 In the drawing area. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. 23 Close the 3D view. for Diameter. change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers. 25 On the Options Bar. and maximize the floor plan. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . and then tag the piping as shown. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs).

304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . you created a wet fire protection system. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. For additional practice. You added tags to pipes. In this tutorial. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. In this exercise. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. 305 .Documenting a Project In this tutorial. add annotations and dimensions. create details.

306 .

dependent views. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. and click Rename. and click OK. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Floor Plans. matchlines. click Training Files. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. 307 . and view references. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. and click Properties. right-click Copy of Level 1. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. 3 In the Rename View dialog. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. If the view included detail graphics. right-click Level 1. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. and apply a view template. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i.rvt.

4 Using the same method. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. 10 In the drawing area. create dependent views for areas B and C. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. more focused. 9 Click OK. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. and then press Esc. and click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. as shown. and click OK. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click Apply Default View Template. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. click Training Files. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy.rvt. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. views and put them on the sheet. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views.

Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . for Target view. click the current value. Click OK. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as ./ ---). 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. For Line Weight. and click OK. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. on the Options Bar. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. select black. In the Color dialog. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. and then press Esc.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. select 11. 14 Click Finish Matchline. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. For Line Pattern. 21 Using the same method. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 20 Select the upper view reference and. select Double Dash 5/8". 13 Press Esc twice. 19 In the drawing area.

23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. crop the dependent views for plans B and C.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and zoom to each of the view references. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. 25 Using the same method. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. as shown. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. 27 Using the same method.

8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. and click Apply Default View Template. and select the section box. Under Graphics. and click to select it. right-click Plumbing Isometric . Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser.Domestic Water. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. select Documentation. 4 In the Project Browser. for View Classification. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently.rvt. The section crop lines no longer display. 2 Zoom in. For Sub-Discipline. enter Plumbing Isometric . under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. click Training Files. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. Click OK. right-click 3D Plumbing. For Default View Template. select Plumbing Isometric. press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Plumbing.29 Close the file with or without saving it.Domestic Water. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. and click Properties. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . for View Name. 6 In the Project Browser.

select 3. select Dash. Click Apply. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 12 Using the same method. and then click OK. 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. press Tab 3 times.9 Right-click. and click to select it. 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. For Pattern. The selected piping displays as a dashed line.

Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. 14 Right-click. as shown). press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights.13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks. and click to select it.

In the drawing area. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric . and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label.Sanitary Waste. 17 Label the fixtures as shown. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping. click Reveal Hidden Elements. ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. and click to select it. On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. On the View Control Bar.Domestic Water view with detailing. and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements. 18 Using methods learned previously. press Tab 3 times.15 Press Esc. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . Right-click. click Close Reveal Hidden Elements.

22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. select To the nearest 1/8". the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. Creating Callout Views | 315 . you use a plan view to create a callout view. and click to place the spot slope annotation. 24 Move the cursor above the pipe. When the view is associated with a sheet. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. and then place the callout view on a sheet. 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. In the Format dialog. verify that Common is selected. 21 Click OK twice. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 25 Press Esc twice. as shown. For Slope. for Rounding. click on the Format value.

and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. click Training Files. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 On the Options Bar. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan). select 1/4"=1'-0''. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down.rvt. for Scale. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .

11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category. for Line Weight. drag it to the sheet. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. under Sheets (all). select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. Click OK. ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. double-click M601 . Creating Callout Views | 317 . using the same method. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. 13 In the Project Browser. select 5.

and click Apply Default View Template. For Title on Sheet. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 17 In the Project Browser. for View Name. and select the viewport.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. Click OK. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. For Default View Template. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. enter WSHP PART PLAN. right-click the callout view. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .

Creating Callout Views | 319 . 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. 19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers.Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.

select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Apply View Template. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). enter Typical WSHP Detail. and click OK. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . right-click the detail view. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. 24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view.21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 25 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click Rename. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. 26 In the Rename View dialog. under Names.

■ work with model-based components. 321 . and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. ■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. duct tags. symbols. you learn how to: ■ add text notes. and annotation to create a legend. linetypes.

8 With the text still selected. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan.Creating Annotations In this exercise. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. click Training Files. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i. as shown.rvt. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down.

13 Press Esc to clear the selection. Add leaders 10 Select the text box. and then click Right Straight. a segment of round duct. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight.9 Press Esc twice. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select a supply diffuser. and a segment of rectangular duct. Creating Annotations | 323 . verify that Leader is cleared. as shown. a return diffuser. 15 On the Options Bar. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. 16 In the drawing area.

select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. 17 Click Modify. for Ducts.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 22 In the Tags dialog. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 24 On the Options Bar.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. click Load. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. under Category.rfa. 20 In the Tags dialog. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. and click OK. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. 21 In the Load Family dialog. and click Open. If necessary. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. clear Leader.

31 On the Options Bar. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. select Horizontal. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. and Attached End. and then press Esc. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. Leader. 26 On the Options Bar. as shown. Creating Annotations | 325 . 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 32 In the drawing area.25 In the drawing area.

33 On the Options Bar. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. for Leader. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . as shown. select Free End. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown. 34 In the drawing area.

not simply an instance property. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. and all elements of that type are affected. That’s because you changed a type property. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. lay out. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. for Leader Arrowhead. 37 In the drawing area. Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. and click OK. select Dot Open 1/16". Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. Creating Dimensions | 327 .36 Press Esc twice. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. select the last tag placed. 40 Using the method learned previously. and lock lighting fixtures. you use temporary dimensions to locate.

rvt. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. and then select the interior face of the wall. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. On the Options Bar. indicating that it’s the active view. select the dimension line. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. click Training Files. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 12 Press Esc. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser.

19 Using the same methods. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. and offset them 8' from the wall. annotation symbols. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. and notes. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.13 Using the same method. Creating a Legend | 329 . Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line. 16 Press Esc. 18 Select the dimension value (7' . click the 3 interior locks on the line. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. Creating a Legend In this exercise. 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures.3 1/2"). and press Enter. enter 8'. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. Because the dimensions are locked. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. linework. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components.

rvt. select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . click Training Files. For Scale.Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 . 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. select Floor Plan. click below the title to place the diffuser. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. enter Diffuser Legend.8 Neck. 10 Using the same method. ■ 9 In the drawing area. For View. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 5 Click in the drawing area.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. select 1/4" = 1' -0". Click OK.

and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. click next to the top diffuser. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Creating a Legend | 331 . 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment.11 Press Esc. 14 In the drawing area.

and then press Esc. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. 21 Press Esc. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 24 Select the component’s break line. 26 Press Esc. 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down.RISE symbol for the copy start point. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE .DROP and its text note. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 27 While pressing Ctrl. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. The selected detail lines are now thin.

double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . 35 Change the text on the right to N. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet.30 Select Spot Elevation . 33 Click to the left of the left break line. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. and then click Modify. enter E. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. 34 Using the method learned previously.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. and then click Modify. Creating a Legend | 333 .MECHANICAL LEGEND. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.

and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 40 Press Esc.39 With the viewport still selected. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.

335 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.113 East elevation view.rvt. detail groups. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Detailing 15 In this lesson. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. A drafting view using detail components. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. A detail callout that references another view. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. and text.

5 In the drawing area. select each of the 2 panelboards. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. clear Leader. 8 Using the same method.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing . place Power Riser . 4 On the Options Bar. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them.113 East on the sheet. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. and then modify and align the views. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. and click to place it.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. Next. 7 Drag the Power Riser .

12 Select the Level 1 line. giving the appearance of a single view. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 . right-click. for Title on Sheet. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. 13 Right-click. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click OK. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. and click Deactivate View.9 Press Esc. and click Activate View. under Identity Data. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. select the 113 North view.

select the 113 East elevation view. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. right-click. 22 Press Esc. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. and click Activate View. 19 Select the Level 1 line. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. as shown. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. 21 Using the drag control. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . In the next exercise. right-click. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. you add wiring to the diagram.

8 On the Options Bar. In the Line Styles dialog. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. expand Lines. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. verify that Chain is selected. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . select 6. notice that there are no snaps active. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. enter Electrical Power. In the New Subcategory dialog.113 North view. indicating that it’s the active view. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . In the left pane of the Open dialog. as shown. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB).Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 . As you draw. 2 Close the Project Browser. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. for Name. click Training Files. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. for Line Weight. and click OK. and then click OK. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. 9 Beginning at the transformer.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. click New. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. Under Modify Subcategories. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles.

340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . as shown. 13 On the Options Bar. enter 1/8". 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3).10 Press Esc. 11 Using the same method. for Offset.

you select the portion of the line that you want to keep.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. TIP When you use the Trim tool. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. so that the result is as shown. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 .

20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B.

28 Click above the cap. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. as shown. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). 29 Click Modify. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc.22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.

select Multiple. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol.31 While pressing Ctrl. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. 33 On the Options Bar. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints.

5. enter 3/32". and press Enter. 39 Move the cursor to the right. Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol.36 Press Esc. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . You enter exact values for each line length. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. enter 0 0. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. 40 Press Esc. and then press Esc. 42 On the Options Bar. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. for Offset.

expand Groups ➤ Detail. enter Ground.125. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. click on the length dimension value.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. Using the same method. Press Esc. enter 0 0. for Name. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. and press Enter. Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser. 50 With the group selected. and click OK. 46 In the Project Browser. and then press Esc. while pressing Ctrl. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. you can ensure that they stay together. 47 In the drawing area. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. select all 3 lines. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog.25.

draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. 52 Select the detail group. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. 54 Select the group. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B.51 Using the method learned previously. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. TP-2B.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 59 Close the file with or without saving it.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). 2 Right-click the copy. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing .rvt. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. In later exercises. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. 5 Zoom in to view the section. for Name. and click Rename. click Training Files. and will place it on sheet E01. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Right-click the ViewCube. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise.

and then click the corner where the Top. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . and then press Esc. click Home.6 Select the section box. Back. and Left sides converge. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. 7 On the ViewCube.

and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. and click Apply View Template. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . right-click. Click OK. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. Walkthroughs. Under Names. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. select 3D HVAC Iso. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear. select 3D Views.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser.

label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. Move the cursor down and to the left. (Right). 15 Using the same method. Typical. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . and click to specify the second leader point. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Complete the text labels. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. as shown. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct.14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader.

and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. and under Extents. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. 25 Click OK. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. and then click OK.To rotate and reposition a text label. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. select Crop Region Visible. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. under Extents. as shown. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. 23 Click on the crop region.

rvt. Click OK. and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. and click Properties. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. For Scale. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. 3 In the Project Browser. Use detail lines to create a detail group. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. Place a detail component. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. select the isometric view. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . select 3" = 1'-0". right-click the view name. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. In the left pane of the Open dialog.29 In the drawing area.

6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. as the rectangle start point. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. as shown. Click OK. 12 On the Element panel. click the point at the top of the drain.4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. select Plumbing. select Documentation. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". 9 Zoom in to the component. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. for Sub-Discipline. For View Classification. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 13 In the drawing area.

I. Concrete. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. 21 In the drawing area. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . for Type. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. (Line). Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. 23 In the drawing area.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. and click OK. select C. select the filled region. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide.15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. 18 With the filled region still selected. 20 Select 1. 22 Click Modify. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region.P. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. and then press Esc. Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck.

press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 31 On the Options Bar. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. and then click to select them. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing .28 Click Modify. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 34 Press Esc. select Multiple. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.

The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down.38 Pan to the other end of the slab. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. (Rectangle). 45 Using the method learned previously. as shown. Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. and then select the side of the slab above the line. 40 Click Finish Region. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . and then press Esc.

select the Flashing Membrane group. press Tab to highlight the chain. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. and click OK.. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. as shown. draw wide detail lines as shown. and then click to select them. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down.Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 52 In the Create Group dialog. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. enter Flashing Membrane_F. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area.D. 49 Click Modify. for Name.

60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . as shown. add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly.55 Press Esc. 61 Using the same method. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down.

select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. and use the grips to resize the masking region. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. 67 On the Options Bar. 70 In the Keynotes dialog. select Leader and Free End. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. 72 If necessary. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. as shown. 64 Press Esc twice. select the keynote and drag the text to the right.62 Press Esc twice. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. 71 Click Modify.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. and then click OK.

and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. 81 Select the text note. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 78 Move the cursor to the left. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange.Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. 80 Press Esc twice. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 76 To select the leader start point. and click to specify the second leader point. and click to specify the text insertion point. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments.

84 Using the following image as a guide. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. as shown. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing .82 Continue annotating the detail.

Drafting Detail Components | 363 .Plumbing Part Plans & Details. select the view title. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. open P103 . 90 Press Esc. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. and then press Esc twice. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. 88 In the drawing area. and click to place it.

For A-----NPP. expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Black and White. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view. for Line Weight. select Auto-Detect. select Visible. For Import units. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation. Click OK. click Training Files.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. select 3.rvt. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing . you import a CAD detail drawing. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. For Layers. For Colors. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.dwg. Click Open. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category.

8 Type ZF. 13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 12 In the drawing area. and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 . and then press Esc. 11 Press Esc. 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet. 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. open P103 . select the viewport title.

366 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful